Chrysler | Jeep Cherokee | Owner`s manual | Chrysler Jeep Cherokee Owner`s manual

2014 Cherokee
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14KL74-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all ROLLOVER WARNING
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe mancustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to ner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll
tions and recommendations in this manual will help over when some other vehicles may not.
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the Consult the following table for a description of the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or this Owner’s Manual:
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windVehicle Identification Number
shield. This number also is stamped into the right front NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
door sill (under the molding) and appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
1
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override .
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . .
. . . . . . . . . .19
. . . . . . . . . .19
. . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .61
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .61
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Belt Pretensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .72
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
. . .113
. . .114
. . .114
. . .115
. . .116
. . .118
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
from the START position, the switch automatically returns
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
to the ON/RUN position.
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Entertransmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with (EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Ignition Node (KIN).
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Replacement Keys
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authovehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
is one that has never been programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
Customer Key Programming
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
performed at an authorized dealer.
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will proGeneral Information
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• This device must accept any interference that may be
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
received, including interference that may cause undeoff after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
sired operation.
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
(RKE) transmitter.
further information).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
To Disarm The System
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the the following methods:
key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
equipped), refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ⬙ in ⬙Things
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
information.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Vehicle Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courdoors using the manual door lock plunger.
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
(extreme bottom position).
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
ther information.
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
activate the system.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Fob (KIN)
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights With Remote Key
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the Programming Additional Transmitters
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
turn on.
performed at an authorized dealer.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
(24 km/h) or greater.
Using The Panic Alarm
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
and horn will remain on.
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal
2. separating RKE halves requires screw removal and
gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
General Information
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, includNOTE:
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
How To Use Remote Start
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Shift lever in PARK
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Doors closed
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
Remote Start mode.
to the ON/RUN position.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opTo Enter Remote Start Mode
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
in the Remote Start mode.
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights • The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nwill disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC
Start request.
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).
the START button.
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and
release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition
switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
DOOR LOCKS
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Manual Door Locks
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
power door locks if:
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enChild-Protection Door Lock system.
abled.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
2. All doors are closed.
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
placed in PARK.
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
4. Any door is opened.
unlocked position.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
be opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theft
alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
search in any passive entry vehicle.
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
transmitter while a door is ajar.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
knobs
handle while a door is ajar.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
the door is ajar.
Entry door handle
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
door panel switch and then close the doors
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does
not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open
with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
Electronic Liftgate Handle/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button on
the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect®, only the liftgate will unlock
when you press the button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate From The Rear
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- NOTE:
down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, • If the window runs into any obstacle during autorelease, and the window will go down automatically.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
To open the window part way, press the window switch
switch again to close the window.
to the first detent and release it when you want the
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
window to stop.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoTo stop the window from going all the way down during
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
Reset Auto-Up
press and release the window lockout button again
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window (setting it in the UP position).
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky
Slider™ open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider™ opening
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slider™ (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the electronic liftgate handle.
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Liftgate Entry
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate handle (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go located in Things To Know Before
Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the NOTE:
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
is open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
second time will close the liftgate.
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftThe power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
gate trim panel.
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
power liftgate functionality.
opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
WARNING!
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
(0 km/h).
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
position.
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
meets sufficient resistance.
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power Some of the most important safety features in your
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a vehicle are the restraint systems:
detection of an obstruction.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
energy during an impact event
severity and type of collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
buckled up in a rear seat.
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or
between you and the door.
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
WARNING!
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
You should read the instructions provided with your
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
shoulder belts properly.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
(Continued)
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your body
and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
(Continued)
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
position.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
shoulder belt.
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which
are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
anchor point.
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, chart below defines the type of feature for each seating
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create position.
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Driver
Center
Passenger
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
Second
Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
the latch plate.
Third Row
N/A
N/A
N/A
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortthe entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
locking mode.
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
Belt Pretensioning
The driver and passenger front seating positions are
equipped with seat belt systems that may incorporate
retractor pretensioning devices. These devices are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in
the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is
tight around the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReThis safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretendesigned to release webbing in a controlled manner. This sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
the occupant’s chest.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authoReminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Seat Belt Extender
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender, and store it.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a Supplemental
Passenger Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the glove compartment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
Advanced Air Bags.
air bags, are located above the side windows and their
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
and type of collision.
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
the outboard side of the front and rear seats.
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger • Instrument Panel
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that may adjust
• Knee Impact Bolster
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
upon occupant weight.
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, •
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
•
authorized dealer immediately.
•
Air Bag System Components
•
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING! (Continued)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam on the side
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may of the seat’s trim cover (front seats) and between the side
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant seat’s cushion trim cover (rear seats). Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
protection.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver and Passenger Side Knee Air Bags and the passenger side knee
bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Knee Air Bags to
provide improved protection for the driver and front
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front
Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC
Air Bags
deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags,
The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and front seat
protection and work together with the Advanced Front belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Air Bags during a frontal impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental
Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxiBecause air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
have deployed.
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Passenger Seat
comes on again after initial startup.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- this vehicle.
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- following:
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the
front passenger seat
• OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the sensors estimate that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward
facing infant seat; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rearward-facing infant
seat*
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Front Passenger Air
Bag Classification
Reduced-power
deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including
a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should
be modified.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortfront passenger seat occupant’s most probable classificaably on or near the floor
tion. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front
passenger seat and where that weight is located. The • Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING! (Continued)
injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat
belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright
position, your back against the seat back, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not
carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.)
while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may cause the OCS to not classify the passenger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Seated Properly
The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improperly may cause the OCS to not classify the passenger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious
(Continued)
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel)
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
around
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger.
will turn on whenever the
The Air Bag Warning Light
OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
air bag system.
Not Seated Properly
does not come on, or
If the Air Bag Warning Light
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™ Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding be used.
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional information). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
WARNING!
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the
latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere
passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully with the latch before closing the seat. In addition,
latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin,
result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight. make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed
downward and fully latched to the base. OverstuffThe passenger seat assembly contains critical compo- ing the storage bin, or a not fully latched passenger
nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag seat cushion, may result in misclassification of the
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front front passenger’s weight. This may result in serious
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as injury or death in a collision.
designed. Do not make any modifications to the front
passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the
passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat
cover or cushion may inadvertently change the airbag
deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system Inflator Units
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bag Inflator Units
The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the
instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and
below the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee
Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/
glove box surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the
full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 milliseconds.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- During collisions where the impact is confined to a
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about oneinflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
when it is inflated.
especially applies to children.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followvehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of ing functions:
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
until the ignition is cycled to off.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Enhanced Accident Response System
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the • Turn Off the HVAC Blower Motor.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the • Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
These data can help provide a better understanding of
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. the rear seats rather than in the front.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- There are different sizes and types of restraints for
ment, can read the information if they have access to the children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
vehicle or the EDR.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafetyindex-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is de- 5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
signed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22 and
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm) tall.
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
follow these steps:
the hips and as snug as possible.
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use.
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
seat cushion.
buckle.
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
All three rear seating positions have
removable head restraints.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Center Seat LATCH
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
behind each rear seating position located on seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
the back of the seat.
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
system at the same time. If you can fit three child
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
install the center child restraint and you must use the
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You
can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)
behind the front passenger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating
position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint
will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
(Continued)
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You must use
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in
position (3), behind the driver. You may use either
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing the child seat in position (1), behind the
front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacrestraint to get a better fit.
turer’s instructions.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatpulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
ing position.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
tions to attach a tether anchor.
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un- Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is Restraints in this Vehicle
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
The head restraints may be removed in
every rear seating position.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
“click.”
attach a tether anchor.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
vehicle seat.
in any direction.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for ChilLatch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconinstall the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
is available.
restraint.
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintea collision.
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes Air Bag Warning Light
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
The light should come on and remain on for four
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
Vehicle
driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Seat Belts
Defroster
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authoFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
2
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .126
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .131
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .144
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .152
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .159
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .163
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .165
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .181
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ ACC Operation at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .186
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .187
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .175
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .190
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .176
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .194
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .197
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Operation . . .203
▫ Turning LDW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ LDW Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Changing LDW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .220
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .222
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .237
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .238
䡵 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense®
Active Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .257
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .258
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .262
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN
ROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Sky Slider™ Control . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Opening The Sky Slider™ . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Closing The Sky Slider™ . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .268
▫ Anti-Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .269
▫ Sky Slider™ Maintenance . . . . . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . .
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .270
. . . . . . . .270
. . . . . . . .272
. . . . . . . .273
. . . . . . . .273
. . . . . . . .274
. . . . . . . .275
. . . . . . . .275
. . . . . . . .275
. . . . . . . .278
. . . . . . . .279
▫ Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .280
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment. . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .283 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .291
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to NOTE: The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- button located on the bottom of the mirror.
ment Panel” for further information.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Assist Call
9-1-1 Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button Report an accident without taking your eyes off the road.
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one Just press 9-1-1 on your mirror and connect.
of several predefined locations for immediate support:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
Outside Mirrors
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via MoTo receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
bile features.
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
vehicle issues.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left and Right Mirror Select
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Models With Express Window Feature
Models Without Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position
following an adjustment.
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Power Seats — If Equipped
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
vehicle.
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Front Seat Adjustment
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
3
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by On some models, the front seats may be equipped with
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Seat Height Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
Uconnect® 5.0 System — If Equipped
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
the Uconnect® display. Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to select HI-level heating. Touch
the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating.
Touch the soft-key a third time to shut the heating
elements OFF.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a second time
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
to select LO-level heating. Touch the soft-key a third time
the Uconnect® display.
to shut the heating elements OFF.
Uconnect® 8.4 System — If Equipped
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
Head Restraints
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect®
System.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
3
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions UP and
DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
Push Button
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To Lower The Rear Seat
To Raise The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
the middle outer edge of the seat.
returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button.
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
The memory switch allows the driver to recall either of Programming The Memory Feature
the two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
the appropriate number button on the switch.
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the number (1) button
within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), if equipped, will display which
memory position is being set.
Driver Memory Switch
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into • For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
memory as follows:
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
1. Turn the ignition ON.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefercan be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in
switch, then press the number (2) button within five
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display which
memory position is being set.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
Memory Position Recall
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC, if equipped.
side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly.
⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC, • For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
if equipped.
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
transmitter within 10 seconds.
display in the EVIC, if equipped.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the
memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
key from the ignition switch.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearthe RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
ward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY
seat will return to its previously set position when you
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
the LOCK position.
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (8 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (23 mm and 68 mm) forward
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
vehicle.
set position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm) Two latches must be released to open the hood.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
or Easy Entry.
3
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Hood Release
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the center front
edge of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
3
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the third detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the system is
on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out
of the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headTo activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
Automatic Headlights Only)
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
turn off in the normal manner.
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this • Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
feature.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
ment Panel” for further information.
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
information.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
Equipped
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Conprovides increased forward lighting at night by automattrol mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when- The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the switch.
headlights are off, the transmission is moved out of
“Park” position, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
3
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Turn Signals
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
steering column.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
Front Map/Reading Lights
turn signal on.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
Lane Change Assist
console. Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond either side of the console. To turn the lights off, press the
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door
three times then automatically turn off.
is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the
dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second
detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Controls
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. If
your vehicle is equipped with a power sunroof the
courtesy lights are located above the rear seats. The
courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the lens. To
turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness
of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders —
if equipped.
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the left dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console and the door handle
lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Dome Light Position
Battery Saver Feature
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex- WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
remain off when the doors are open.
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in Windshield Wiper Operation
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the then turn off.
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
WARNING!
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Windshield Washer Operation
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
following conditions:
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temmay reduce Rain Sensing performance.
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
NOTE:
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUSensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
3
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Uconnect® 5.0 System — If Equipped
Uconnect® 8.4 System — If Equipped
Press the “Climate” hard-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering
wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a
second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
Controls Soft-Key
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
To Resume Speed
will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If the button settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to on vehicle configuration).
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Deactivate
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
moderate hills is normal.
EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
Control.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
3
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
tions to the vehicle will effect the performance of the conditions:
Adaptive Cruise Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When the brakes are overheated.
plays “ACC Ready.”
• When the driver door is open.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle The following conditions cancel the system:
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• You depress the brake pedal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
• You press the CANCEL switch.
To Turn Off
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF
button.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
ON/OFF button.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Resume
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
2 seconds, then the driver will either have to press the
Resume button, or apply the throttle to reengage the
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the SET + button.
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments
WARNING!
until the button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the EVIC display.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and pressing the SET - button.
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
follow these warnings can result in a collision and the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
death or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
If the SET - button is continually pressed, the set speed • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
will continue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downreflected in the EVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainNOTE:
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
will automatically slow the vehicle.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance • The distance setting is changed.
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
ACC Activation).
bar (shorter).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howIf there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
necessary.
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of ACC system applies the brakes.
the set speed.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
speed.
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of capacity.
the sensor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
Brake Alert
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
vehicle ahead.
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC Operation at Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within 2 seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resuming speed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the parking Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
cancelled.
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a information it displays depends on ACC system status.
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the
the ACC system will be cancelled.
following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
Control Ready.”
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
ACC SET
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will continue to display in
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
the lower right hand corner of the cluster.
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC conditions temporarily limit system performance.
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
• Distance Setting Change
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• System Cancel
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC /
• Driver Override
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
• System Off
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
require a sensor realignment.
Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional informa- • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
tion refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Mode” in this section.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
malfunction.
vehicle behind the lower grille.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC / FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC
/ FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC / FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
examine the windshield and the camera located on the cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
Precautions While Driving With ACC
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
When the condition that created limited functionality is no issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectlonger present, the system will return to full functionality. edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean intervene.
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more Towing A Trailer
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
3
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising
speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To change between the different cruise control modes,
press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL
(Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL
(Fixed Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode,
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control ON.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating
what speed was set. An indicator CRUISE will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If
the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h)
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
increments until the button is released. The decrease in
you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) To Cancel
increments until the button is released. The increase in set The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will • You press the CANCEL button.
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Systhe button when the desired speed is reached, and the
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
new set speed will be established.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
• The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
To Resume Speed
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
20 mph (32 km/h).
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
To Turn Off
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
memory if:
• You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON/OFF button.
• You turn off the ignition.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of autonomous braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE:
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
(10 km/h).
front of you.
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
The forward collision button is located on the switch
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the panel below the Uconnect® display.
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Forward Collision Button
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System Screen — if equipped.
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off).
NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system vehicle is in PARK.
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking:
in front of you.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
the Uconnect® display.
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking 2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or Near
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
soft-key for your desired preference.
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the setting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with 6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen — if equipped.
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
NOTE: The settings can only be changed when the
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
vehicle is in PARK.
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking:
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the lower
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
right side of the Uconnect® system.
avoid a possible collision.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or Near soft-key which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
for your desired preference. Then press the back arrow.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
Once the condition that limited the system performance
driver after ignition shut down.
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as performance state. If the problem persists, see your
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the authorized dealer.
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
Service FCW Warning
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
higher rate of speed.
NOTE:
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
FCW Limited Warning
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) — IF
EQUIPPED
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Operation
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LDW system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
100 mph (160 km/h). The LDW system uses a forward
looking camera to detect lane markings and measure
vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LDW system provides a haptic warning in
the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LDW system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LDW system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning LDW ON Or OFF
The default status of LDW is “ON”.
To turn the LDW system OFF, press the lane departure
warning button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the LDW system back ON, press the lane departure
The lane departure warning button is located on the
warning button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
off) and a lane sense on display is shown in the EVIC.
Lane Departure Warning Button
Lane Sense On Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE: The LDW system will retain the last system state
ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LDW Warning Display
The LDW system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC).
3
3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
When the LDW system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when the lane boundaries have not been detected and the
LDW indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LDW system is ON, the left line turns from gray
to white to indicate that the lane marking has been
detected. The LDW indicator is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LDW system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane cross situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LDW indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing White to Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LDW system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LDW system is ON, the lane lines turn from
gray to white to indicate that the lane markings have
been detected. The LDW indicator is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system
is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC and
a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will torque to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation,
the left thick lane line turns solid white, the left thin
line remains solid white. The LDW indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LDW system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane cross situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LDW indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will torque to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White to Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LDW system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
7.0 EVIC Screen — If Equipped
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LDW system is ON; the lane lines are gray • When the LDW system is ON, the left line turns from
when the lane boundaries have not been detected and the
gray to white to indicate that the lane marking has
LDW indicator is solid white.
been detected. The LDW indicator is solid white when
only the left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the EVIC
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LDW system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane cross situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LDW indicator changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LDW system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LDW system is ON, the lane lines turn from
gray to white to indicate that the lane markings have
been detected. The LDW indicator is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system
is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC and
a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will torque to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LDW indicator changes from solid green
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Thick Yellow—Solid Thin Yellow
Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LDW system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane cross situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LDW indicator changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will torque to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Thick Yellow—Solid Thin
Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LDW system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Changing LDW Status
NOTE:
The LDW system settings can be made through the • When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
Uconnect® system screen.
(60 km/h) and below 100 mph (160 km/h).
Follow these steps to change the LDW settings:
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
the Uconnect® display.
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
ward collision warning, etc.)
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of torque feedback amount and
the early or late warning zone boundary through the
personalization settings.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
above. A display warning will appear in the EVIC
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System 6 mph (9 km/h).
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and ParkSense® Sensors
recommendations.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detectobstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
changed to the ON/RUN position.
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
direction, depending on the location, type and orientaREVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
tion of the obstacle.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
the park assist ready system status.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs —
Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
Radio
Volume
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
None
None
None
6th Solid
None
None
No
39-25 in
(10065 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
system, the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below the When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
Uconnect® display.
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense®
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be ON.
ParkSense® switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instruother obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Electronic appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift
lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
faulted condition, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damUNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long age the sensors.
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clusfascia/bumper.
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
vehicle is in REVERSE.
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled / disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transmission, ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
the automatic braking function in REVERSE gear is not disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
available.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual transmission). If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift
lever positions, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
EVIC indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Sensors
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Rear Park Assist
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
the park assist ready system status.
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ParkSense® Display
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs —
Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
Radio
Volume
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200-150 cm)
None
None
None
6th Solid
None
None
No
39-25 in
(10065 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Fast
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
Front Park Assist
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for
manual transmission, the ParkSense Warning screen will If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
No Tone/Solid Arc
No Tone/Flashing Arc
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.
ParkSense® switch
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display a
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at eiwill be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where
switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense®
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
be ON.
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILService The ParkSense® Park Assist System
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNDuring vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
AVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
is
detected
within
the five second pop-up duration. The
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
car
graphic
will
remain
displayed for as long as the
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
vehicle
is
in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
Information
Center
(EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILInstrument
Panel”
for
further
information.
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
message appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damposition and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
age the sensors.
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
radio when it is sounding a tone.
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
application to be delayed.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
CAUTION!
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor
close proximity.
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
(Continued)
instrument cluster.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parkmust intervene as required.
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
substitute the driver.
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
remove their hands, the system will cancel, and the
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
driver will be required to manually complete the
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
parking maneuver.
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
side or passenger side).
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System
To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again
Uconnect® display.
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist • Driver’s door is closed
switch
• Rear liftgate is closed
• Driver’s door is opened
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
• Rear liftgate is opened
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
• Electronic Stability Control / Anti-lock Braking Sys- 15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC will instruct the driver to
tem intervention
slow down. if the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
• Performing 6 parking attempts to position the vehicle
must then reactivate the system by pressing the
into the parking space.
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and
operate and search for a parking space when the followrear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
ing conditions are present:
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park
in a forward gear (manual transmission)
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
• Ignition is in the RUN position
present.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the EVIC
display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE: When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense®
Active ParkSense Searching
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a
parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the When an available parking space has been found, and the
turn signal is not activated.
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands, the driver should check their surroundings and
begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system allows up
to 6 parking attempts to be made.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
place the shift lever into the REVERSE position. When
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
position, the system will instruct the driver to check their
surroundings, and to remove their hands from the steering wheel
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Entire Surroundings — Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
When the vehicle has been moved into the parallel park
position you will be instructed to place the shift lever into
the DRIVE position, move forward slowly and check
your surroundings.
After moving forward and checking your surroundings
you may be instructed to place the shift lever into the
REVERSE position and move backward slowly into position while you check your surroundings.
3
Check Entire Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Entire Surroundings — Shift to Reverse
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the EVIC
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.)
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles)
3
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking space for the maneuver).
parking sequence.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove hands,
the driver should check their surroundings and begin
to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system allows up
to 6 parking attempts to be made.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Once the vehicle is in position you will be instructed to
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
place the shift lever into the REVERSE position. When
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
position, the system will instruct the driver to check their
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
surroundings, and to remove their hands from the steerreason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
ing wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Check Entire Surroundings — Remove Hands From
Steering Wheel
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has been moved into the perpendicular
park position you will be instructed to place the shift
lever into the DRIVE position, move forward slowly, and
check your surroundings.
After moving forward and checking your surroundings
you may be instructed to place the shift lever into the
REVERSE position and move backward slowly into position while you check your surroundings.
Check Entire Surroundings — Shift to Drive
Check Entire Surroundings - Shift to Reverse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 MPH, the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position. A touch screen
control (soft button) to disable display of the camera image
is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE
can be disabled via a touch screen control (soft button)
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup
path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center
line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
When enabled, ⬙zoom⬙ mode will display a close-up view
of the trailer hitch to assist with connecting a trailer to the
vehicle. A touch screen control to switch between ⬙zoom⬙
mode and the standard view is made available whenever
the camera image is displayed.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
1. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
2. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
Uconnect® 5.0
3. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
1. Press the “Settings” button.
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
2. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
3. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handBackup Camera” to enable/disable.
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
channels.
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
mitter button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the inditwo seconds each time). If the garage door opener/
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
device activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
follow these steps:
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
mitter button.
steps.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
time-out in the same manner.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held programming, plug it back in at this time.
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
fully trained.
follow these steps:
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
door may open and close while you are programming.
release the button.
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
in your vehicle.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located to the left between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open positions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
halfway to the comfort stop position. Press the switch
rearward and release it again, the sunroof and sunshade
will open fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop the sunroof.
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
The sunroof and sunshade will stop halfway automati- movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
cally at the comfort stop position. Press and hold the closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
switch rearward again to the full open position. Any forward again.
release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof
and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half secand stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
shade switch will stop the shade.
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
Opening Power Shade — Express
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to rearward again.
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Closing Power Shade — Express
Pinch Protect Feature
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. The shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the shade.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, it will automatically close NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
during the ⬙Sun Shade Express Close⬙ movement.
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the Wind Buffeting
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean The Sky Slider™ is a full-length, soft-top, power roof that
opens front to rear or rear to front.
the glass panel.
Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions
Ignition Off Operation
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle NOTE:
Information Center (EVIC)
• The system will not operate when ambient temperature is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK • The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
86 mph (138 km/h) or above.
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
• Opening and closing the Sky Slider™ repeatedly without the engine running may run the battery down.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the Sky Slider™ vehicle contents, and the vehicle
interior:
• Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider™
when it is frozen. Wait until the Sky Slider™ is
thawed before operating.
• Opening the Sky Slider™ when damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the softtop material and the inside of your vehicle. Make
sure the Sky Slider™ is dry before opening.
• Always close the Sky Slider™ when leaving your
vehicle, damage to the vehicle interior can occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Sky Slider™ open for several
weeks at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent
discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow
the creases to smooth out. This is especially important if the Sky Slider™ was opened when not
completely dry.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider™ open.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and make
sure all passengers are properly secured too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before operating the Sky Slider™ make sure that
no moving parts of the Sky Slider™ can injure a
person or animal.
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the Sky Slider™ components or the roof area while
operating the Sky Slider™.
• If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Automatic Mode, press and
release the switch immediately to interrupt the
operation.
• If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Operator Mode, release the
switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
• Do not allow small children to operate the Sky
Slider™.
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the Sky Slider™ while operating the Sky Slider™ switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Sky Slider™ Control
The Sky Slider™ switch is located between the sun visors
on the overhead console.
NOTE: The Sky Slider™ switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Opening The Sky Slider™
Using Operator Mode
Press the switch rearward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the front and move toward the rear of the
Press the switch rearward and release it within onevehicle.
half second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the front
and move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle. Press the switch forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the rear and move toward the front of the
Press the switch forward and release it within onevehicle.
half second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the rear
and move automatically toward the front of the vehicle. NOTE: During operation, any movement of the Sky
Slider™ switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
NOTE:
Closing The Sky Slider™
• During operation, any movement of the Sky Slider™
Using Automatic Mode
switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
Using Automatic Mode
• To resume the operation from a partially open posi- Press and release the button in the center of the switch
and the Sky Slider™ will close automatically from any
tion, press and release the switch a second time.
position.
• The Sky Slider™ will not open from the front and the
rear at the same time. The Sky Slider™ must close fully
before opening it from the opposite end.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes
completely. The left motor facing forward will close the
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the front, press the switch
top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle. The right
forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™ will move forward.
motor will close the top when it is open from the front of
Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™ travel at any
the vehicle.
point.
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the rear, press the switch
rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider™ will move The Sky Slider™ will retract automatically if it detects an
rearward. Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™ obstruction while closing. If this occurs, remove the
obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky
travel at any point.
Slider™.
Manual Override
Using Operator Mode
The Sky Slider™ drive motors are mounted to the roof
above the cargo lamp. In the event that your vehicle
losses battery power, you can close the Sky Slider™ by
turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a
6 mm Allen wrench. To do so, you must first remove the
cargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert the wrench
into the “Allen” shaped hole in the appropriate motor
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the Sky
Slider™ is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects
from the Sky Slider™ before closing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Wind Buffeting
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the Sky Slider™ in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the Sky Slider™ open, adjust the Sky Slider™
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
Sky Slider™ Maintenance
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is
not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
Refer to “Sky Slider™ Top Care” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Rear Power Outlet
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the
device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
3
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located inside the upper portion of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile
device.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless 3. Use the adjustable cradle to hold the mobile phone in
position. The cradle moves by pushing down on the
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or
finger tabs and moving the cradle in or out.
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone
provider.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit www.driveuconnect.com for additional information and for supported mobile phones.
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, perform the following:
1. Place only one mobile Qi enabled phone on the
wireless charging pad.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
2. Adjust the position of the mobile phone on the pad once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a
until charging begins.
different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be
readjusted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile
phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to
function normally as it is charging.
If the LED indicator begins flashing red, see your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle key fob on the wireless
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature may
not work properly while a mobile phone is being
charged.
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile
phone and wireless changing pad. Metal object(s)
such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If
metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile
phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove
the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to
cool before removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could result in personal injury, including
burns.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
STORAGE
Glove Box Storage Compartment
Front Cupholders
The glove box storage compartment is located on the
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers, right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the
located in the center armrest.
latch to open the storage compartment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Their is also an additional storage bin located above the Console Storage Compartment
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this
section for more information.
Glove Box Storage Compartment
Upper Console Charging Pad
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Center Console
Center Console Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Rear Storage Bin
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
Cargo Load Floor Loops
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
3
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert the
right spring-loaded post (located on the end of the cover
housing) into the right attachment points.
WARNING!
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Then, insert on the opposite end of the cover housing into
the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle. REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
release the handle.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end
of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
the first detent for intermittent operation and to OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
position.
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the switch bank by the manual climate controls.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional
five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on
vehicles equipped with Skyslider®.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by MOPAR® accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .298
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 7” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .332
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .338
䡵 Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .358
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .359
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .362
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without
Touch-Screen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Manual Climate Controls With
Touch-Screen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With
Touch-Screen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .380
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Air Demister Outlet
2 — Air Outlet
3 — Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Controls
4 — Horn / Driver Air Bag
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Instrument Cluster
Electronic Speed Controls
Storage Compartment
Radio
9 — Passenger Air Bag
10 — Glove Compartment
11 — Lower Switch Bank
12 — Uconnect® Hard Controls /
Climate Controls
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Stop/Start Ignition Button
Trunk Release Button
Dimmer Switches
Headlight Switch
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display/
Odometer Display
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
(RPM x 1000).
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
2. High Beam Indicator
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
lights are on.
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
This indicator will illuminate when the park make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
lights or headlights are turned on.
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows 7. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. Light — If Equipped
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con6. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
trol (ESC) is off.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 8. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
the conventional brake system will continue to operate running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
information.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC 11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
caused the ESC activation.
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
9. Speedometer
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Indicates vehicle speed.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
10. Air Bag Warning Light
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
12. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
14. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel
pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
15. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION! (Continued)
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
17. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
4
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Stop/Start
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning
EVIC Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• UP Arrow Button
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
access the information screens or sub-menu
upward through the main menu and submenus
screens of a main menu item.
(Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain,
Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
• DOWN Arrow Button
access the information screens or sub-menu
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
screens of a main menu item.
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle • OK Button
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Press the OK button to access/select the information
A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press
and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 3.5” Display
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. Brake Warning Light — If Equipped
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
2. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
4. Reconfigurable Telltail Display Area
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long
as the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed
in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On”.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
6. Brake Warning Light
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
provides the driver with visual and steering
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use
of a turn signal.
When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane lines
and LDW indicator are the color gray.
When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines change to
white and the LDW indicator changes to green.
When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation, the
approaching lane line and the LDW indicator change
from white to yellow.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warnhas been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
ing” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacWARNING! (Continued)
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
dropped below a specified level.
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apIf brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
WARNING!
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is inspected by an authorized dealer.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
(Continued)
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 10. Reconfigurable Telltale Display
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans7. Fuel Gauge
mission fluid temperature that might occur
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive
8. Low Fuel Telltale
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
fuel is added.
light goes off.
9. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further inforIf you continue operating the vehicle when the
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
Your
Vehicle.”
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
• Lane Sense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low.
WARNING!
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
filler cap is loose.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates and is active only in
This area displays the dedicated speed warn4WD Low range when either the HDC switch
ing telltale.
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
12. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following
This displays the set speed of the Electronic message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
• Electronic Speed Control ON
Speed Control.
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
13. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the • Electronic Speed Control SET
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmisThis light will turn on when the electronic
sion range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
speed control is SET. For further information,
position (Off-Road Mode).
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
11. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
14. Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on the
EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until
the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle
idle. After five minutes, the system will cool and return to
normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
15. 4x4 LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
17. Temperature Gauge
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
16. SERV 4X4 Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4x4 is in need of
service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays — 7” Display
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
1. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
2. EVIC Selectable Display Area
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
provides the driver with visual and steering
torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use
of a turn signal.
When the LDW system is ON and ready the lane lines
and LDW indicator are the color gray.
When the LDW system is armed, the lane lines change to
white and the LDW indicator changes to green.
When the LDW system senses a lane cross situation, the
approaching lane line and the LDW indicator change
from white to yellow.
This area displays selectable information (Compass,
Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG).
3. Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
4. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
ing” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The main display area will normally display the main menu
or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The
main display area also displays “pop up” messages that
consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information
messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long
as the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed
in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On”.
7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic
Speed Control.
8. EVIC Selectable Display Area
This area displays selectable information (Compass,
Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG).
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
6. Dedicated Speed Warning Telltale
4WD Low switch is activated and the transmisThis area displays the dedicated speed warnsion range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
ing telltale.
position (Off-Road Mode).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates and is active only in
4WD Low range when either the HDC switch
on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK
mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following
message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display
This will display the distance setting for the
ACC system. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features OF Your Vehicle”.
10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales
“9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) feature has been engaged and the gear selected is
displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to
“Starting And Operating”.
11. Instructional Area
This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e.,
Push Brake To Start”).
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display
WARNING!
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans- If you continue operating the vehicle when the
mission fluid temperature that might occur Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumiwith severe usage such as trailer towing. It may nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive cause a fire.
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this • Low Fuel Telltale
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
light goes off.
fuel is added.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
• Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Low Coolant Level Indicator
• SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
coolant level is low.
service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windoperating and needs service. For further inforshield washer fluid is low.
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your
Vehicle.”
• 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the • Lane Sense Service — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveLane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator
creased torque at the wheels.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
filler cap is loose.
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Odometer Display / Fuel Gauge / Temperature Gauge
/ Submenu Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages and Submenus.
• Fuel Gauge
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If
Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for more information.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on the
EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until
the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle
idle. After five minutes, the system will cool and return to
normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
OFF/LOCK position.
upon your personal driving style.
Oil Change Required
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Service Antilock Brake System
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Power Steering
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Cruise Off
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Cruise Ready
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Service Airbag System
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Traction Control Off
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Washer Fluid Low
• Brake Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Oil Change Due
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Fuel Low
• Battery Voltage Low
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Lights On
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Turn Signal On
• Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Key in Ignition
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Doors Open
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Gear Not Available
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Digital Speedometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
to scroll through the sub-menus and press the
OK button to change the display between km/h and mph.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
will be displayed:
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Press the If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the infor- displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
mation sub-menus and press the OK button to select or ICON.
reset the following resettable sub-menus:
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
Only
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
Oil Temp
color than the other tire pressure value.
Coolant Temperature
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Oil Life
Pressure System” is displayed.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Battery Voltage
Tire Pressure
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” Fuel Economy
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip icon is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip A information
L/100 km with Bargraph)
will display the following:
• Range To Empty (RTE)
Distance
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy
Stored Messages
Elapsed Time
Press and release the UP arrow button until the
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Messages display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
to scroll through the sub-menus and press the
OK button display the active source.
Gear Display
Screen Setup
• None
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup
sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is displayed.
• Compass
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
Upper Left
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Oil Temp
• Current Gear: On
• Current Gear: Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Time
• Average MPG
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current MPG
• Average MPG
• Trip A
• Current MPG
• Trip B
• Trip A
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Oil Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Cancel
• Okay
Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Range to Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio Information
• Menu Title
Uconnect® ACCESS SETTINGS
Uconnect® Access 5.0 soft-keys and hard-keys
The Uconnect® Access system uses a combination of soft
and hard keys located on the center of the instrument 1 — Uconnect® Access Soft-Keys
panel that allows you to access and change the customer 2 — Uconnect® Access Hard-Keys
programmable features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® Access
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® Access system may also have a Screen
Off and Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
Access screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second
time to turn the screen on.
Uconnect® Access 8.4 soft-keys and hard-keys
1 — Uconnect® Access Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Access Hard-Keys
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® Access system.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete either press the Back
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Access display.
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
Customer Programmable Features —
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the or down through the available settings.
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable Display
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
will be available.
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SiriusXM Setup. • Display Mode
Soft-Keys
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
time.
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
arrow back soft-key.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Units
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
soft-key.
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Length
soft-key.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re• Set Language
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
to return to the previous menu.
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
Clock
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a previous menu.
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Set Time Hours
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Set Time Minutes
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be
set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
• Time Format
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front
When in this display, you may select the time format of you. This allows for a more dynamic driving experidisplay setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a ence. To change the FCW status, touch and release the
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Conarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Safety / Assistance
Vehicle”.
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the following settings will be available.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane
departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide
either an early, medium or late warning zone start point.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Lane Departure Torque — If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist — If Equipped
Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
information.
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph • ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Chime Volume — If
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Equipped
or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in “Unand operating information.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• ParkSense® Front Park Assist Chime Volume — If
• ParkSense® Active Park Assist Braking — If
Equipped
Equipped
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
and operating information.
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactiposition and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of arrow back soft-key.
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
• ParkView® Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Active ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide
Lines — If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• Fixed ParkView® Rear Backup Camera Guide
Lines — If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
• Hold ‘n Go™
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Hold ‘n Go™ is a comfort feature that allows the driver Lights
to remove their foot from the brake pedal while the
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
vehicle is in drive. When this feature is selected, it will
will be available.
automatically hold the vehicle in position when stopped,
without requiring the brake pedal being depressed. The
vehicle will resume motion when the accelerator is
pressed.
For further information, refer to “Hold ‘n Go™” in “Starting And Operating”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, touch
the + or - soft-key to select your desired time interval.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Headlights With Lock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be • Sound Horn With Lock
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headthe door locks are activated. To make your selection,
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkto setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
Doors & Locks
the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Sound Horn With Remote Start
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Auto Unlock On Exit
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
touching the handle more than once will only result in the
driver’s door opening. If driver door first is selected, once
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
transmitter).
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the • Passive Entry
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NGo™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
• Horn With Remote Start
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
soft-key the following settings will be available.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the foldesired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
lowing settings will be available.
return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
Compass Settings – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the followDVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if ing settings will be available.
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to • Variance
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds,
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the arrow back soft-key.
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ• Headlight Off Delay
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Equalizer
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the followfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touch ing settings will be available.
directly on the desired setting.
• Paired Devices
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect® Access User’s Manual.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the SubAfter pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following scription Information screen.
settings will be available.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
• Channel Skip
the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make and is available for U.S. residents only.
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio
arrow back soft-key.
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Subscription Information
SiriusXM Setup
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it
will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB
port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
1 – USB Port
3 – AUX Port
2 – SD Card Slot
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls Without
Touch-Screen — If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position.
1 – RECIRCULATION Control
2 – Front Blower Control
3 – MAX Air Conditioning (A/C)
4 – Temperature Control
5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 – REAR DEFROST Mode
7 – MODE Control
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue
area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
Air Conditioning Operation
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
MAX A/C
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the A/C
closer the control is to a particular
is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated.
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C).
A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Panel Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved for best windshield and side window defrosting.
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
Floor Mode
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help
small amount through the defrost and side win- dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
dow demist outlets.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
Press this button to choose between outside air intake or
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
defogging, select the outside air position.
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any out- • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
side odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
the mode control selection by pressing the A/C button.
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
Air Outlets
NOTE:
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED airflow.
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make seat passengers.
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Recirculation Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Economy Mode
Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen — If
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to Equipped
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Hard-Keys
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem- The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Stop/Start System – If Equipped
4
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Hard-keys
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And 4. Front Defrost Button
Soft-keys)
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
1. MAX A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
3. Recirculation Button
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
Press and release to change the current setting, the timer function.
indicator illuminates when ON.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
as follows:
of air is directed through the defrost and side
Panel Mode
window demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side winadjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
dow demist outlets. This mode works best in cold
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
or snowy conditions.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
Bi-Level Mode
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed when necessary.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
7. Modes
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may increase.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
for warmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen,
press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
red arrow soft-key for warmer temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperaPress and release this button to turn the Climate Control ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
ON/OFF.
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
area indicates cooler temperatures.
Provides temperature control. Push the hard-key button
for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-screen,
press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the
blue arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Automatic Climate Controls With
Touch-Screen — If Equipped
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.
4
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-keys
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys And 4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator this function will cause the ATC to switch between
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into Operation” for more information.
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feailluminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
3. Recirculation Button
to the previous setting.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
window.
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Hard-key
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger tem- Soft-key
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
will automatically exit this feature.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
9. SYNC
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
as follows:
of air is directed through the defrost and side
Panel Mode
window demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side winadjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
dow demist outlets. This mode works best in cold
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
or snowy conditions.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off Defrost Mode
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
Bi-Level Mode
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and temperature settings for best windshield and side winfloor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed dow defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may will increase.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
11. Modes
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
for warmer temperature settings.
ON/OFF.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature conClimate Control Functions
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touch-screen, press and slide the A/C (Air Conditioning)
soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
for cooler temperature settings.
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sysNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
trol. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
mance.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
NOTE:
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
is ON.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experitrols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculasystem to function automatically.
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
NOTE:
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
and then turn off.
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
by selecting the Uconnect® customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
section of the manual.
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8, To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
system will achieve and automatically maintain that on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
comfort level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Manual Operation
Summer Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control. must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
(Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant selection.
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
Winter Operation
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
selected in Manual operation.
is not recommended because it may cause window
Operating Tips
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiVacation Storage
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condiWhen this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system Outside Air Intake
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damMake sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
age when the system is started again.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
slush, and snow.
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes
a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to A/C Air Filter
fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
NOTE:
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
periods, as fogging may occur.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Nine–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .395
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE AND FOUR-WHEEL
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .392
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .395
▫ Single Range All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Dual Range Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵
䡵
䡵
䡵
▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System – If
䡵 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB). . . . . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELEC-TERRAIN™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ HOLD ‘n GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ BRAKE SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ HOLD ‘n GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .420
. . . .424
. . . .424
. . . .425
. . . .426
. . . .427
. . . .430
. . . .430
. . . .431
. . . .431
. . . .432
. . . .433
. . . .436
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case Only . .438
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Select Speed Control (SSC) — Four-Wheel Drive
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .458
Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case and
E-Locker Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .463
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped . . . .450
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) – If Equipped . . . .451
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) – If Equipped . . . . .451
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .466
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .475
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .477 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .478
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .496
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .484 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .491
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and If Engine Fails To Start
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
WARNING!
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
Starting” procedure.
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
Tip Start Feature
serious personal injury.
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transcontinue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
and vehicle.
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
procedure.
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
information.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Tip Start
After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
(Continued)
5
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
(Continued)
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Nine–Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission. The transmission gear
range (PRND) is displayed both beside the shift lever and
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever
and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REBrake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock SysInterlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK tem⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission driving.
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
pedal must be pressed.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond
this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-)
or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
brake.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
NOTE:
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffithe selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
especially important when the engine is cold.
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
PARK
grade.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
WARNING!
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
vehicle in this range.
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
Gear Ranges
(Continued)
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal and lock button on the shift lever
released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of
PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter
This range should be used for most city and highway
clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downdamage due to overheating.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “TransDRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
tics under all normal operating conditions.
the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or be modified depending on engine and transmission
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imSelect (ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
(ERS) Operation⬙ in this section) to select a lower gear achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
will improve performance and extend transmission life inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nortemperature has risen to a suitable level.
mal operating limits, the transmission controller may
DRIVE
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
following steps:
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
1. Stop the vehicle.
SPORT
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
further information.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 5. Restart the engine.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
shifting between all available gears.
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside shift lever forward (-). The transmission will shift to the
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift
lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top
available gear.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALL WHEEL DRIVE AND FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
Single Range All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If
Equipped
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Single Range All Wheel Drive Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle Dual Range Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
5
Dual Range Four-Wheel Drive Switch
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
selectable mode positions:
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the driveline components..
• 4WD LOW
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
• REAR LOCK
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
• NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
range position can be used to force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. 4WD LOW is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for further information on the various positions and their
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
intended usages.
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
Shifting Procedures
NEUTRAL
Shift Positions
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Shifting Into 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
4WD LOW
light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It forces the remain on solid when the shift is complete.
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. It
provides additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message
will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
Selec-Terrain Switch
the requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforNOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a mesmation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Insage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
strument Panel” for further information.
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the 6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may oc(N) button (located above the selector switch) for
cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
four seconds, until the light behind the NEUTRAL (N)
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
symbol starts to blink, indicating shift in progress. The
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
5
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Turn OFF the engine.
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK and remove the
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System – If
ignition key.
Equipped
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD
LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the
Selec-Terrain Knob.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Activating the Rear E-Locker
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
running.
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
conditions must be met:
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker , press the REAR LOCK
button once.
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
NOTE:
2. The ignition switch in the ON position or the engine
running.
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK
REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
button once.
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights
deactivating the Rear E-Locker System
in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK • The Rear E-Locker System will automatically disengage if the vehicle is driven above 50 MPH (80 km/h).
indicator light on.
Once the vehicle speed is reduced below 15 MPH
(24 km/h) the system will reengage the Rear E-Locker.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,
below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and
left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to
align.
SELEC-TERRAIN™
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD
LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with instructions on how to complete
the requested shift.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to
minimize wheel slippage.
• Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may
be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
controls are set to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin.
• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved
steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.
Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control. Use for low speed obstacles such as large
rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE: Rock mode is only available on the vehicles
• Sport – This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
equipped with the OFF-Road package.
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are
increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power (Refer to “All Wheel Drive and
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
details). This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Driving Through Water
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than
5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be Flowing Water
considered before entering the water:
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
CAUTION!
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm).
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv- vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
ing through water may cause damage that may not be that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water,
try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and
location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
control.
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not Hill Climbing
been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Fourimmediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
Maintenance
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent
Control if equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control
System⬙ in this section for further information. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels
turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
straight up or down.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmishill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by sion whenever possible.
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
propeller shafts.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
your vehicle ready when you need it.
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
and cleaned as soon as possible.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
After Driving Off-Road
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
The electric power steering system will give you good
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the
vehicle
has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
“Electronic
Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understandreduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
ing
Your
Instrument
Panel” for further information.
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
during parking maneuvers.
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feaservice.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the EVIC.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only be released
when the ignition switch is ON.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and
an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,
when the ignition switch is turned OFF. Once the park
brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
Ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or
Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
made to drive away.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
must be ON. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the parking brake switch down momentarily. You may
hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car
while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice
a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once
the parking brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, the parking brake will
remain engaged.
WARNING!
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
automatic transmission is placed in Park, or with a manual
transmission, whenever the ignition switch is turned off.
Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer
selection through the EVIC.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
the transmission is placed in Park.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Safehold
Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in Park, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch under conditions that would
normally engage Safehold. Once manually bypassed,
Safehold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position.
HOLD ‘n GO™
Enabling Hold ‘n Go™
Hold ‘n Go™ is a driver selectable feature that can be
enabled or disabled via the personalization settings in the
radio or instrument cluster. Available settings are “On” or
“Off”.
Activating Hold ‘n Go™
For Hold ‘n Go™ to engage and hold vehicle at standstill
Hold ‘n Go™ is a comfort feature that allows the driver the following is required:
to remove their foot from the brake pedal while the
• Hold ‘n Go™ must be enabled
vehicle is in drive
Hold ‘n GoTM has three states:
• Off ; Hold ‘n Go™ is not enabled and will not activate.
• Enabled; Hold ‘n Go™ is available and will engage
when the activation criteria are met.
• Driver must select a forward gear (Drive or ERS
selection 1 thru 9)
• Driver must bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
using the brake pedal
Once at a standstill Hold ‘n Go™ will engage by auto• Active ; Hold ‘n Go™is enabled and actively holding
matically holding brake pressure when the driver rethe vehicle at standstill.
leases the brake pedal. The brake pressure will be held
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
for up to three minutes. After three minutes, Hold ‘n • When the Electric Parking Brake is engaged the
“BRAKE” icon will illuminate in the instrument clusGo™ will automatically engage the Electric Parking
ter, a single chime will sound, and the “HOLD”
Brake. Once the Electric Parking Brake is engaged Hold
message will extinguish.
‘n Go™ will release the brake pressure and return to the
enabled condition.
BRAKE SERVICE MODE
Releasing Hold ‘n Go™
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your authoThe driver can depress the accelerator to drive away at
any time when Hold ‘N Go™ is engaged or when the
Electric Parking Brake is engaged as long as the driver
seat belt is buckled. The brakes will automatically release
when the driver depresses the accelerator.
rized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can
Indication to the driver
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
• When Hold ‘n Go™ activates, a “HOLD” message will actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
illuminate in the instrument cluster. The HOLD mes- easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
sage is confirmation to the driver that Hold ‘n Go™ EVIC system in your vehicle. This menu based system
has engaged and is holding the vehicle.
will guide you through the steps necessary to retract the
EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
must be followed to reset the park brake system to The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
normal operation:
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
ability, and control.
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis- • After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
tances, or brake damage.
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
slow speeds.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever
possible.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to
“Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support
(RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). Further, all
vehicles equipped with a two-speed transfer case have
Hill Descent Control (HDC) and those with the Trailhawk
package also have Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Traction Control System (TCS)
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode
or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and
the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate • For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
is in PARK.
period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills (i.e., less than 7%), or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not
a substitute for active driving involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an
incline while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Hill Start Assist,” under
⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
6. Press the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an • Active ; Hold ‘n Go™is enabled and actively holding
the vehicle at standstill.
additional one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
Enabling Hold ‘n Go™
Hold ‘n Go™ is a driver selectable feature that can be
enabled or disabled via the personalization settings in the
radio or instrument cluster. Available settings are “On” or
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to “Off”.
its previous setting.
Activating Hold ‘n Go™
HOLD ‘n GO™
For Hold ‘n Go™ to engage and hold vehicle at standstill
Hold ‘n Go™ is a comfort feature that allows the driver the following is required:
to remove their foot from the brake pedal while the
• Hold ‘n Go™ must be enabled
vehicle is in drive
• Driver must select a forward gear (Drive or ERS
Hold ‘n GoTM has three states:
selection 1 thru 9)
• Off ; Hold ‘n Go™ is not enabled and will not activate.
• Driver must bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
• Enabled; Hold ‘n Go™ is available and will engage
using the brake pedal
when the activation criteria are met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Once at a standstill Hold ‘n Go™ will engage by auto- Indication to the driver
matically holding brake pressure when the driver re• When Hold ‘n Go™ activates, a “HOLD” message will
leases the brake pedal. The brake pressure will be held
illuminate in the instrument cluster. The HOLD mesfor up to three minutes. After three minutes, Hold ‘n
sage is confirmation to the driver that Hold ‘n Go™
Go™ will automatically engage the Electric Parking
has engaged and is holding the vehicle.
Brake. Once the Electric Parking Brake is engaged Hold
‘n Go™ will release the brake pressure and return to the • When the Electric Parking Brake is engaged the
“BRAKE” icon will illuminate in the instrument clusenabled condition.
ter, a single chime will sound, and the “HOLD”
Releasing Hold ‘n Go™
message will extinguish.
The driver can depress the accelerator to drive away at
any time when Hold ‘N Go™ is engaged or when the
Electric Parking Brake is engaged as long as the driver
seat belt is buckled. The brakes will automatically release
when the driver depresses the accelerator.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case Only
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Hill Descent Control and Selec Speed Control Switch
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while • Parking brake is released
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC • Driver door is closed
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Activating HDC
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the
gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
activate.
NOTE: During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmis• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override:
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating HDC
• Driver door opens.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph for greater
the following conditions occur:
than 70 seconds.
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake • The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph (HDC exits
application.
immediately)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below Feedback to the driver:
40 mph.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni- switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, about the state HDC is in.
or is on an uphill grade.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
Disabling HDC
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The parking brake is applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Select Speed Control (SSC) — Four-Wheel Drive
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to Models With Two-Speed Transfer Case and
excess speed.
E-Locker Only
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
The Hill Descent Switch is located in the lower switch 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
bank below the climate control.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
WARNING!
with brake or throttle application)
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the
SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph
• Parking brake is released
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
• Driver door is closed
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driver is not applying throttle
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Activating SSC
•
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once •
the following conditions are met:
•
• Driver releases throttle
•
• Driver releases brake
3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Transmission is in any selection other than P
• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE: These SSC default set speeds are dependant on
hill grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the
vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed
will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value being
.6 mph (1 km/h).
NOTE:
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the gear • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below
40 mph.
chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set • Vehicle is shifted to park.
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Disabling SSC
Feedback to the driver:
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow- The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
ing conditions occur:
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
• The driver presses the SSC switch.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
• The parking brake is applied.
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• Driver door opens.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph for greater
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
than 70 seconds.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
• The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph (HDC exits
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
immediately)
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe
vehicle speed.
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle driving to the prevailing road conditions.
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system has up to three operating modes: “ESC On”
“Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or
4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case
(if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for
specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to
“Full Off” for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four- “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
the vehicle is in motion.
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESC normally allows.
WARNING!
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
⬙ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ button and the ⬙ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When
And 4WD Low Range
the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The “ESC
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” is always illuoff-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
minated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momenvehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
tarily press the “ESC Off” button. This will restore the
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
below the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”
NOTE:
mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine • “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
running. After five seconds, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate and an “ESC
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
the transfer case is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
OFF” message will appear in the odometer. Press and
release the trip odometer button located on the instru• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
ment cluster to turn off this message.
sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
position. This will occur even if the message was
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/k). At
cleared previously.
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/k), the system automatically
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
become active automatically once an excessively swaying
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds trailer is recognized. No driver action is required.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is functhat caused the ESC activation.
tioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt
to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is only active in the
off or full off.
default “ESC On” mode. TSC can be disabled by pressing
the “ESC Off” switch and entering “ESC Partial Off” mode.
It is not active in the “ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off”
modes. Refer to the ESC portion of this section for an
explanation of the different ESC operating modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
WARNING!
If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) – If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support (RBS) – If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield
wiper setting and only functions when they are in use.
When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provide a torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
Tire Markings
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedmolded into the sidewall preceding the size designaing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exthe section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
NOTE:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire and Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the weight referenced here.
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
capacity calculated in Step 4.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
manual to determine how this reduces the available
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgeRide Comfort And Vehicle Stability
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment combine them with other types of tires.
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
Tire Repair
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
Tire Types
your vehicle.
All Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow Tires
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary beduring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
handling of your vehicle.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring Section for more inforWhile studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mation.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- Spare Tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
CAUTION!
Run Flat Tires
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
run flat mode. A run flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replaced.
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
4x4 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Non-Trailhawk Models
without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against • Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire
damage.
sizes are not chainable.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as • The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
• Use on Front Tires Only
4x4 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Non-Trailhawk Models
with a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended:
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
4x2 Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire 4x4 Trailhawk Models
sizes are not chainable.
• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use
of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Damage to 4x2 Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
may result if tire chains or traction devices are used
with original equipment size tires.
• Damage to 4x4 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
• Damage to 4x4 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride.
5
Tire Rotation
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring cold placard pressure value.
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
CAUTION!
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
warning have been established for the tire size
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
eration or sensor damage may result when using
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approxitype, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation,
(Continued)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
NOTE:
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitorand maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
ing Telltale Light.”
failure or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
while adjusting your tire pressure.
the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Base System
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and a
readings to the receiver module.
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
and to maintain the proper pressure.
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as
The TPMS consists of the following components:
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will auto• Receiver Module
matically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
TPMS to receive this information.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message
TPMS sensors.
will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
that affects radio wave signals.
15.5 mph (25 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale
Light,” as long as no tire pressure is below the
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
housings.
road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnTelltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure
ing limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next ignition key
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h)
cycle.
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
display in the EVIC.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
The TPMS consists of the following components:
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
• Receiver Module
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
pressure values in a different color.
different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
EVIC will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM Vehicles With Full-Size Spare
SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
can occur due to any of the following:
monitored by the TPMS.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
TPMS sensors.
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In
that affects radio wave signals.
addition, the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic show3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
ing the low tire pressure value in a different color.
housings.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
value in the same color as the other pressure values in
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
place of the different color low tire pressure value. The
solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE
EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE”
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
message to remind you to service the flat tire.
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monifor 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthe pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having
an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
General Information
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
following conditions:
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi• This device may not cause harmful interference.
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
• This device must accept any interference received, includ- before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto
manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary
to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends
the use of gasoline that
3.2L Engine
Your engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane premium gasoline
for optimum performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at may be used in your vehicle.
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from
operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered
by the new vehicle warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
not be covered under warranty.
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents
or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you
should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler cap.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the
fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry
on the door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on interior trim panel for
release cable with the tip of your key.
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
fuel filler door.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further review.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
Payload
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires Loading
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
Inflation Pressure
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe brakes operate.
hicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle. If you use a standard weight- carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a
collision.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem- Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
ready for operation⬙ condition.
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight allowance for the presence of a driver.
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weightdistributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
(Continued)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
Tongue Weight (TW)
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be swaying motions while traveling.
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
2.4L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic
with Trailer Tow
Package
Model
Frontal Area
4x2 or 4x4
4x2 or 4x4
4x2 or 4x4
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
Maximum Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Consider the following items when computing the
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
many trailer collisions.
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
your bumper or trailer hitch.
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
heavy traffic.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Automatic Transmission
you can get back to cruising speed.
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the City Driving
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transperformance and extend transmission life by reducing
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highway Driving
Air Conditioning
Reduce speed.
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front-Wheel Drive
Models
NOT ALLOWED
Front
Rear
ALL
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models
See Instructions:
• Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
All-Wheel Drive
Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Models
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by
light comes on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in 8. Start the engine.
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when 9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™, press and hold the ENGINE START/
STOP button until the engine shuts off.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key
fob.
Neutral Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
16. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE:
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
gear clash.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
10. Release the brake pedal.
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
12. Start the engine.
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
14. Release the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .522 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .524 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
6
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate .
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
6
Jack and Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the chocks.
Jack and Tool Assembly
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
points holds the jack handle in place.
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
6. Remove the spare tire.
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmisedge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
areas.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating
notches on the sill flange.
6
Rear Jacking Location
Jacking Locations
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Front Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions, and
information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each wheel bolt is 100 ft/lb.
(135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
Stowed Tire and Jack
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install all five wheel bolts on the wheel.
Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
WARNING!
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
tightness of each wheel bolt is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them result in personal injury.
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
dealer or service station.
handle counterclockwise.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
properly seated against the wheel.
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The correct
tightness of each wheel bolt is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
dealer or service station.
tighten the wheel bolts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and Preparations For Jump-Start
precautions.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
6
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
battery.
and the fuel injection system.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
you should have the battery and charging system inREVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
spected at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
CAUTION!
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the MOR access hole at the front of the shift lever
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
assembly, and push and hold the override release lever
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
down.
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake and turn the engine
OFF.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without 9. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
starting the engine (engine Off).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transconsole bezel.
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
4. Locate the MOR access hole which is located in the may also be towed as described under “Recreational
right side of the sifter in the front.
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
NONE
2WD Models
AWD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km/h)
max distance
See instructions under
“Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in Neutral
• Tow in Forward
direction
BEST METHOD
Front
Rear
OK
IF transmission and
transfer case are operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h max
speed)
30 miles (48 km/h) max
Distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or the vehicles key
fob is unavailable , refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
ground it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- ground (using a flatbed truck, tow dolly or wheel lift
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with front equipment with the front wheels raise).
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
CAUTION!
distance must not exceed 15 miles (48 km) under the
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirefollowing conditions.
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Two-Wheel Drive Models
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed
(with ALL four wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .549
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Sky Slider™ Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Front Turn Signal And Front Side
Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .592
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
— Oil Fill Cap
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK gASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replaceIf the problem persists, the message will appear the next ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
MIL light off.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
PROGRAMS
not crank or start the engine.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
of a normal bulb check.
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
happen:
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
not proceed to the I/M station.
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainterecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacyou may need to do nothing more than drive your turer’s warranty.
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that
protect the performance and durability of your vehicle
and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do
not use chemical flushes in these components as the
chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or
air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top
of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
months, whichever occurs first.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 0W-20 API Certified engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine
oil viscosity grade for your engine.
If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20 API
Certified may be used as a temporary suitable alternative.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.2L Engine
Materials Added To Engine Oil
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ber should not be used.
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
at every engine oil change.
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condishould be used instead of a chassis hoist.
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
WARNING! (Continued)
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
(Continued)
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling – R134a – If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling – HFO 1234yf
– If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriNOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
oil, and refrigerants.
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
maintenance intervals.
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
WARNING!
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
operating or personal injury may result.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Windshield Wiper Blades
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaliftgate glass.
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are 1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
containers.
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
WARNING!
The windshield and rear window washers share the same Commercially available windshield washer solvents
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid must be exercised when filling or working around
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir the washer solution.
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Exhaust System
residual water.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe system.
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is immotion.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
damage.
vehicle.
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Engine Coolant Checks
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pretrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
your vehicle.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
expansion bottle must also be protected against
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
freezing.
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of maintenance intervals.
your engine which contains aluminum components.
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at Fluid Level Check
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the • Front axle lubricant should be at the bottom edge of
life of the vehicle.
the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- • Rear axle lubricant should be 0.5 inch (11 mm) below
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
the bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
in a level position.
disassembled for any reason.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the
top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol
Use only manufacturer’s recommended lubricant. Refer
dampened cloth.
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Washing
Lubricant Selection
Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth
Under normal operating conditions, the lubricant in- system is preferred.
stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for
CAUTION!
the life of the vehicle. Lubricant changes are not necessary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray
water. Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated wand directly at the sides of the top, as this can
with water.
damage the seal and force water past the weather
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Sky Slider™ Top Care
strips.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. General Cleaning
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not
in removing dust and other foreign particles.
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
If Hand Washing:
• Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.
• Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
• Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,
and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing
soap. Do not use detergent.
• Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about
two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
• Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealership for further suggestions.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents,
petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until
the top is thoroughly dry before opening it.
• Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap Additional Cleaning Procedure
and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
on painted and chrome surfaces.
stains, apply MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
• Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches
top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub
tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
streaks in the material.
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still
apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is
no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm
water. Let the top dry before opening it.
Protection
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR®
Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft
and pliable.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard® is suggested. The top should be clean and Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
dry before application of the protectant.
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
CAUTION!
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Avoid getting Scotchguard® on the surrounding which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
these items might occur.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
match the color of your vehicle.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Glass Surfaces
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
rag.
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Headlights
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F1
Cartridge
Fuse
100
Amp
Violet
MiniFuse
—
Description
Radiator Fan Assy
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Cavity
F7
Cartridge
Fuse
—
225
Amp
150
Amp
70 Amp
Tan
—
F8
—
F10
—
F2
F3
F4
F5
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
Battery Feed (B+)
Alternator
—
Cabin Heater - Diesel
Engine Only
Power Steering
—
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain Control
Module - Diesel
Engine Only
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Fuel Injectors
Power Takeoff
Unit (PTU)
Cavity
F12
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F13
—
F14
—
F16
—
MiniFuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Brake Vacuum
Pump - If Equipped
Engine Control
Module (ECM)
Drivetrain Control
Module (DTCM)/
Power Take-Off Unit
(PTU)/RDU/RDM/
Brake System Module
(BSM)/Brake-Pedal
Switch/Electric Park
Brake (EPB)/Backup
Lamp Switch
Ignition Coils/Ignition
Coil Capacitors
20 Amp
Yellow
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F20
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
—
F22
—
F23
70 Amp
Tan
30 Amp
Green
—
F19
F26
F28
MiniFuse
—
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Tan
—
—
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Starter
Cavity
F30
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Electric Power
Steering/Coil-Relay
K21 (Fuel Pump)
Driver Door Module
(DDM) - If Equipped
Body Controller
Module (BCM) - Feed 3
OC/DC Converter
A/C Clutch
Radiator Fan Enable
F33
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
Fuel Heater - Diesel
Only
Transmission Control
Module (TCM) - ZF
9–Speed
F34
F37
F38
F39
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Glow Plugs - Diesel
Only
HVAC Blower Motor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Cavity
F40
F41
F42
F43
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
Trailer Tow Park
Light - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
Electric Park Brake
(EPB) - Left
Trailer Tow Left
Stop/Turn Light - If
Equipped
Trailer Tow/7-Way
Connector - If
Equipped
Passenger Door
Module (PDM) - If
Equipped
F46
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
F44
30 Amp
Green
—
F45
30 Amp
Green
—
F47
F49
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
MiniFuse
Description
—
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
—
Sunroof Control
Module - Single Panel
Sunroof/Skyslider - If
Equipped
Drivetrain Control
Module (DTCM)
Power Lumbar
Support/Power
Inverter A/C
Wireless Charging
Pad/Power Liftgate If Equipped
BSM-ECU & Valves
—
F50
30 Amp
Green
—
F53
30 Amp
Green
—
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F55
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F56
—
F57
—
F58
—
F60
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Rear Camera/
Blindspot Monitoring
Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/KIN/RF
Hub/Electric Steering
Column Lock (ESL)
Fuel Pump Motor
F62
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F63
—
F64
—
Voltage Stabilization
Module (VSM)
Power Outlet-Center
Console
F65
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror Switch/
Driver Window
Switch/Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Front Heated/Vented
Seats - If Equipped
Heated Steering
Wheel - If Equipped
HVAC/Instrument
Panel Cluster
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Cavity
F66
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
In Car Temperature
Sensor/Humidity
Sensor/Driver Assist
System Module
(DASM)/Park Assist
(PAM)
Transfer Case Switch
(TSBM)/Active Grill
Shutter (AGS)
Windshield De-Icer If Equipped
Trailer Tow Right
Stop/Turn Light - If
Equipped
F73
F69
—
10 Amp
Red
F71
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F72
—
F75
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
—
F76
—
F77
—
F78
—
F74
MiniFuse
Description
—
Rear Defog
—
Engine Control
Module (ECM)
Cigar Lighter
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Rear Differential
Module (RDM)
Fuel Door Release/
Brake Pedal Switch
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/
Digital TV (DTV)/
Diagnostic Port
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F79
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F80
—
F83
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
F84
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
Integrated Center
Stack (ICS)/HVAC/
Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM)/
Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC)
Radio/CD
F88
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F89
—
F92
—
F93
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
Headlamp Washer
Pump - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Back-up
Lamps - Gasoline Engine Only/Brake System Module (BSM) Diesel Engine Only
F94
F95
MiniFuse
Description
15 Amp
Blue
Seat belt reminder
(SBR)/Smart Camera If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling If Equipped
Rear Power Outlet
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
10 Amp
Red
Brake System Module
(BSM) - Pump Motor
Electric Park Brake
(EPB) - Right
Sunroof/Rain Sensor/
ECMM/Window
Switch
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Cavity
F96
Cartridge
Fuse
—
F97
—
F98
25 Amp
Natural
30 Amp
Green
F99
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
HIFI Amplifier - If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Module If Equipped
—
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Cargo Lamp
Overhead Console Lamp
Reading Lamp
Bulb Number
TL212–2
PLW214–2A
WL212–2
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime
Running Lamps
Bulb Number
HIR2
7
D3S (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
7440NA
194
H11
LED ( Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an
Authorized Dealer)
W16W
W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off and the key removed.
Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID
headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light
source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Unlock upper access door in wheel liner.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and
headlamp bulb cap.
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
8. Lock upper door in wheel liner.
unlock it.
Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker Lamp
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing. 1. Open the hood.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
then connect the replacement bulb.
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket
assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. 5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
to lock it in place.
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
the vehicle.
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to 3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
panel.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
10. Close the liftgate.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
License Plate Lamp
9. Connect the electrical connector.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on
the lamp assembly for removal.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.
11. Close the liftgate.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
U.S.
Metric
15.8 Gallons
60 Liters
5.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
U.S.
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Quarts
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
9.5 Liters
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
If 0W-20 engine oil is not available, SAE 5W-20 API Certified may be used
as a temporary suitable alternative.
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.2L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.2L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87-89 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you only use MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
602 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serthan your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “InChange Required” message is displayed. Severe Operatstrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odoming Conditions can cause the change oil message to
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
further information.
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 603 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
140,000
150,000
14
15
224,000
240,000
130,000
208,000
120,000
192,000
110,000
176,000
100,000
160,000
90,000
144,000
80,000
128,000
70,000
112,000
60,000
96,000
50,000
80,000
30,000
40,000
64,000
Or Kilometers:
48,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
32,000
20,000
M 604 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
E
N
A Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
N
C
E Or Years:
2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 605 M
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine **
Replace spark plugs – 3.2L Engine **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 606 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .610
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .611
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .614
9
608 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 609
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
9
610 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 611
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
612 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 613
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
manufacturer.
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
9
614 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
individual problems between you, your authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either the
dealer, and the manufacturer.
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
Service Manuals
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 615
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Call toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
Owner’s Manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
616 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
Traction Grades
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 617
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
620 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .172
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .556
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .373
INDEX 621
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .275
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . .
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Capacities, Fluid .
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . .
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Oil (Engine) . .
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.458
.431
.430
.599
.571
.427
.572
.572
.308
.395
.157
.591
.118
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
10
622 INDEX
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .550
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.581
.362
.283
.391
.361
.469
.283
.283
.612
.569
.566
.568
.596
.570
.570
.567
.566
INDEX 623
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.570
.569
.569
.567
.578
.172
.282
.609
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.275
.129
.430
.403
.432
.169
.445
.255
10
624 INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .550
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
INDEX 625
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
. . . . . . . . . . .582
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.556
.382
.556
.555
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.522
.118
.156
.391
.283
.599
.596
.118
.575
.572
.553
.597
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.154
.594
.142
.197
.412
.538
.575
.489
.492
.490
.490
.494
.489
.302
.492
.490
.489
.489
10
626 INDEX
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .522
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.152
.593
.583
.152
.156
.154
.152
.156
.592
.151
.152
.139
.139
.130
INDEX 627
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .161
. . .503 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . .283 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
. . .282
. . .257 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
. . .149 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.136
.362
.392
.298
.156
.316
.438
.433
10
628 INDEX
.22 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
.19
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
.18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
.12
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
.17
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Keyless Entry System . . .
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX 629
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .304
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .159
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .304
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
10
630 INDEX
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .304
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Function Control Lever .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.478
.551
.490
.155
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
INDEX 631
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .459
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .275
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Sunroof (Sky Slider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
10
632 INDEX
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .569
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .515
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .518
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .360
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof
Sky Slider Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
INDEX 633
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .60
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
10
634 INDEX
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Sky Slider Power Roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .360
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
INDEX 635
Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .65
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .373
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .458
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.118
.472
.463
.475
.523
.469
.463
.466
.464
.523
.472
.458
.478
.301
.615
.466
.473
.477
.452
10
636 INDEX
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.454
.467
.471
.508
.472
.452
.504
.149
.499
.540
.504
.512
.504
.431
.499
.511
.503
.506
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .257
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
INDEX 637
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Cherokee
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14KL74-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Cherokee
Download PDF